2010 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name COLORADO are registered trademarks of
General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not
be on your specific vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found
on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25848175 B Second Printing
©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
# : Fog Lamps
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑18.
H. Horn on page 4‑3.
I. StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 and
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑18.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System on
J. Audio System(s) on page 4‑41.
K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑16.
page 2‑66
.
L. Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
M. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
N. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑23.
O. Glove Box on page 3‑43.
F. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10. Fog Lamps on
page 4‑12 (If Equipped). Exterior Cargo Lamps on
page 4‑13
.
G. Parking Brake on page 3‑33.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Press L to sound the horn and to flash the exterior
lamps for 30 seconds.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑5.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to lock and unlock the
doors from up to 9 meters (30 feet) away from the
vehicle.
Manual Door Locks
Lock or unlock the door from the outside with the key in
the driver or front passenger door or press the LOCK or
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Press UNLOCK to unlock
the doors and press
LOCK to lock them.
Lock the door from the inside by moving the manual
lever on the door forward or rearward.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Tailgate
Press L or U on the switch on the armrest to lock or
unlock the doors.
Open the tailgate by pulling up on the outside handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
For more information see:
.
Door Locks on page 3‑7
On vehicles with a locking tailgate, use the ignition key
to unlock it.
.
Power Door Locks on page 3‑8
For more information see Tailgate on page 3‑10.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
Press or pull up on the front of the switch to open or
close the window.
For more information see:
.
Manual Windows on page 3‑13
.
Power Windows on page 3‑13
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
To adjust the seat using the control on the outboard
side of it:
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
.
Slide the horizontal control forward or rearward.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
.
Move the front or rear of the horizontal control up
or down.
.
Move the entire horizontal control up or down.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
Power Lumbar
Press and hold the front or rear of the control on the
outboard side of the seat until you have the desired
lumbar support.
Use the vertical control on the outboard side of the seat
to raise or recline the seatback by moving the control
forward or rearward.
For more information see:
.
Manual Seats on page 2‑2
.
Power Seats on page 2‑3
.
Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑6
.
Power Lumbar on page 2‑4
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Safety Belt
With the ignition on, press the top of the switch on the
outboard side of the seat to turn the heat on at the high
setting.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the heat to the
low setting, and put it in the center position to turn the
heat off.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑14.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑19.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑28.
For more information see Heated Seats on page 2‑5.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑46
.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
See Head Restraints on page 2‑9.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will
turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver airbags are not affected
by this.
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74 for
important information.
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the
control pad to move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
Vehicles with power
outside mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Interior Mirror
The automatic dimming inside rearview mirror will
automatically reduce the glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3‑39.
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or
R (right) to choose the driver or passenger
mirror.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps, located in the front and cargo area of
the vehicle, come on when any door is opened.
Turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel,
located next to the exterior lamps control, all the way
up. In this position, the lamps remain on whether a door
is opened or closed.
Reading Lamps
Press the lens on the lamps to turn each reading lamp
on or off.
These lamps will not come on with the dome lamps.
.
Dome Lamp Override on page 4‑14.
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑13.
To adjust the steering wheel:
.
Exit Lighting on page 4‑14.
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever
toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
;: Manual operation of the parking lamps and other
exterior lamps.
Exterior Lighting
2: Manual operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑11
.
Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑12
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑12
.
Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 4‑13
O : Turns off all exterior lamps including the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Automatic operation of the headlamps and other
exterior lamps at normal brightness.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Climate Controls
8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
A. Temperature Control D. Air Conditioning
N: Delays wiping cycle. Move the band to adjust the
frequency of wipes.
B. Fan Control
E. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
6 : Slow wipes.
1 : Fast wipes.
See Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
9: Turns the wipers off.
Windshield Washer: Push the paddle on top of the
multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the
windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑5 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
q TUNE r : Turn to select radio stations.
Vehicle Features
q SEEK r : Press to go to the previous or to the next
station and stay there.
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑41.
Setting Preset Stations
Radio stations are stored as presets.
For vehicles with an XM radio, a maximum of
30 stations can be stored as presets using the six
numbered pushbuttons.
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed
on the six numbered buttons.
See Setting Preset Stations under Radio(s) on
page 4‑42
.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
PWR: Press to turn the system on and off.
q VOL r : Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection displays.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio
To set the time and date for the radio with CD
(MP3/WMA):
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
displays. Press and hold the MIN button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition on
or off.
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the HR and MIN buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME displays. To accept this time, press and hold the
HR and MIN buttons, at the same time, for another
two seconds. If the time is not available from the
station, NO UPDAT (update) displays.
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑42
.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes for
the time to update.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your
specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on
page 4‑42
.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Cruise Control
The DIC is located on the instrument panel cluster.
It displays the status of many vehicle systems and
enables some features to be personalized.
The cruise controls are
located at the end of the
multifunction lever.
Use the trip reset stem located on the instrument panel
cluster to scroll through the available functions. For
more information, see DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑33
.
Vehicle Personalization
Some vehicle features can be personalized through the
DIC. These features include:
.
Language: English, Spanish, or French
9: Turns the system off.
R: Turns the system on.
.
Automatic Door Locks
.
RKE Feedback
+: Use to make the vehicle accelerate or resume a
For more information, see DIC Operation and Displays
previously set speed.
on page 4‑33
.
rT: Press the button at the end of the lever to set the
speed.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Outlets
StabiliTrak®
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The Electronic Stability Control system assists with
directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. The system turns on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
The vehicle may have an accessory power outlet
located below the climate control system and on the
rear of the center console.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold d until d
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑15.
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control System (TCS)
page 4‑36
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6
The traction control system limits wheel spin. The
system turns on automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
.
.
To turn off traction control, press and release d on
the instrument panel. d illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is displayed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑36.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on
traction control.
For more information, see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 5‑8.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑65 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑66.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). Vehicles without a
center pillar, like extended cab models, will have the
Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver
side extended cab door, above the door latch post. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31. The warning light
will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Life System
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message
when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter.
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center of
the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE message
is displayed.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem until
several beeps sound. This confirms that the oil life
system has been reset.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
OnStar®
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
to an OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is
pressed, or if the airbags or ACR system deploy.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This information usually includes the vehicle's GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the crash that the vehicle was
involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the virtual advisor feature of OnStar
hands-free calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle's GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-72
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-80
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
To adjust the seat:
.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used to
operate them are located
on the outboard side of
the seats.
horizontal control forward or rearward.
.
.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up
or down.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up
or down.
.
.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Seatbacks on page 2‑6 for more information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the knob is
located on the outboard
If the vehicle has this
feature, the control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat(s).
side of the driver seat.
Press and hold the front of the control until you have the
desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar support,
press and hold the rear of the control.
Turn the knob to increase or decrease lumbar support.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
This feature will heat the cushion and back of the seats.
Press HI to turn the heat to the high setting. Press LO
to turn the heat to the low setting. Put the switch in the
center position to turn the heat off.
If the vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to
work. The seat will heat to the last setting if the ignition
has been turned off and then turned back on.
The passenger safety belt must be fastened for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger seat.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seat(s).
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
{
If the seats have power
reclining seatbacks, use
the vertical power seat
control located on the
outboard side of the seat.
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
.
.
To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats may have adjustable head restraints.
If the vehicle has rear seats, they may have adjustable
head restraints.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull up on the head
restraint to raise it. To
lower the head restraint,
press the button located
on top of the seatback
and push down on the
head restraint.
To fold the seatback
forward, push the lever on
the side of the seat
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
Seatback Latches
The vehicle may have front seatbacks that fold forward
for easy access to the rear seats or the storage area
behind the seats.
WARNING:
{
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until it latches.
If the seatback was reclined before being folded
forward, it will return to the reclined position.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the seat:
Rear Seats
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
If the vehicle has an
extended cab, there may
be forward folding seats in
the rear area.
To fold the rear seat cushion(s) from the stored position
to the sitting position, pull the front of the seat cushion
down completely.
The rear seat storage compartments must be closed
before folding the seat down. See Rear Storage Area
1. Secure the safety belt buckle to the inboard side of
the seat with the hook and loop fastener (A), so
that it does not move when not in use.
on page 3‑44
.
2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with the trim
panel.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the rear seatback(s) forward:
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
The rear seatback(s) in the crew cab can be folded
forward.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
1. Disconnect the rear center safety belt latch from
the mini buckle by inserting the tip of the safety
belt tongue into the slot on the buckle. Let the belt
retract.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Make sure the seatback(s) is locked by pushing
and pulling on it.
2. Pull the loop, located
on the outboard side of
the seatback, forward
until you hear a click.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
3. Fold the seatback(s) forward.
3. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to the
mini buckle. Make sure the safety belt is not
twisted.
To return the seatback(s) to the upright position:
1. Lift the seatback(s) and push it into place.
4. Push and pull on the latch plate to be sure it is
secure.
WARNING:
{
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright, locked position.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
WARNING:
{
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a
moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or
death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
WARNING:
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑21.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑36 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑38. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position,
if equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on
page 2‑34 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, the child restraint locking
feature may be engaged. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Extender on page 2‑35
.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in
the right front seating position may affect the
passenger sensing system, if equipped. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74 for
more information.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is
not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating position.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑83.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the release buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
shoulder belt.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides
for the rear outside positions. If not, they are available
through your dealer/retailer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide back on its
storage clip located between the interior body and the
seatback.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑28
.
The vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2‑35
.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑28 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length
of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑28.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
(Continued)
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING: (Continued)
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
WARNING:
{
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
WARNING:
{
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
(Continued)
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑46 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
WARNING: (Continued)
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74
for additional information.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
WARNING:
{
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always better
to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is
available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For extended cab models with rear seats, there are
exposed metal lower anchors for each rear seating
position, attached to the back wall, near the seat
cushion.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors, place your
hand in a palm-up position and reach up between the
seat cushion and the seatback.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Front Seat — Regular
and Extended Cab without
Rear Seats
For crew cab models, there are exposed metal lower
anchors for each rear outboard seating position, located
where the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crew Cab
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
The top tether anchors in a crew cab model are located
on the back wall behind each rear seating position. Be
sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
The top tether anchors in an extended cab model are
located on the center of the back wall behind a
removable cover for the rear seating positions. Be sure
to use an anchor located nearest to the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑44 for additional
information.
Regular and Extended Cab without Rear Seats
For regular and extended cab models without rear
seats, there is a top tether anchor located behind a
removable cover on the back wall behind the right front
passenger seat. You may have to pull the seatback
forward to access the anchor.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer's instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached, attach
the top tether to the top tether anchor (A). Refer to
the child restraint instructions and the following
steps:
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access the top
tether anchors (A). See Rear Seat Operation
(Extended Cab) on page 2‑11 or Rear Seat
Operation (Crew Cab) on page 2‑12
.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has a fixed
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
restraint.
3.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
3.2. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
4. Tighten the top tether.
2.3. Attach the top tether to the anchor (A). Make
sure that you secure the top tether to the top
tether anchor and not to the seatback
latch (B).
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2.4. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks
into its upright position. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is secured properly.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach the lower attachments on the child
restraint to the lower anchors (D) in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will
show you how.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor (C). Refer to the
child restraint instructions and the following steps:
Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab
without Rear Seats
The vehicle has a right front passenger airbag and may
also have a passenger sensing system. If the vehicle
has a passenger sensing system it is designed to turn
off the right front passenger frontal airbag when an
infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑62 and Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑74 for important safety
information and additional information on installing a
child restraint in the right front seat position.
1. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 2‑62 for instructions on
installing the child restraint using the safety belts.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer's instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached, attach
and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Pull on the finger access tab to remove the
cover to access the top tether anchors (C).
2.2. Route the top tether (A) through the loop (B)
at the top of the seatback to attach the top
tether to the nearest top tether anchor (C).
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access the top
tether anchor. See Seatback Latches on
3. Tighten the lower anchor attachments and the top
tether. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
page 2‑10
.
2.2. Pull on the finger access tab to remove the
cover to access the top tether anchor.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head
If the position you are
using has a fixed
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
restraint.
3. Attach and tighten the top tether according to your
child restraint instructions.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑46 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑46 for top
tether anchor locations.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑44
.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach the
top tether to the top tether anchor. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑46
.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Tighten the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑46.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑23 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING:
{
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always better
to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑44.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger's frontal airbag under certain conditions.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74 and
(Continued)
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑46 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑46 for top tether anchor locations.
WARNING: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74
for additional information.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a child
restraint should not be installed in your vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
6. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends using a
top tether anchor, attach the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came
with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑46
.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Tighten the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑46.
9. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing
system, and when the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑23.
If a child restraint has been installed and on indicator is
lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”
under Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑74 for
more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it might
be helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
WARNING:
{
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
page 2‑70
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑36 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑38
.
There is an airbag
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
WARNING:
{
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑22 for
more information.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
(Continued)
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
The driver's airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
driver's seat and the right front passenger's seat. Seat
position sensors provide information that is used to
determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced
level or at full deployment.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 2‑66. Roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system's designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the
vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's
upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑70 for more information.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
WARNING:
{
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑71.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors (if equipped with power door locks), turn the
interior lamps on, flash the hazard warning flashers,
turn off the radio, and shut off the fuel system after the
airbag inflates. You can lock the doors again by using
the door lock. The interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers will deactivate after approximately 15 minutes.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
WARNING:
{
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
.
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑19
.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag is not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator, If equipped, is visible on the instrument panel
when the vehicle is started.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
We recommend that rear‐facing child restraints not be
transported in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
United States
Canada
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,
or the symbol for on or off will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑23.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
.
The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
.
The system determines that a small child is
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
present in a booster seat.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑23.
passenger's frontal airbag, depending upon the
person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in
your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑22
for more information, including important safety
information.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
page 2‑9
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑62.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your dealer/
retailer.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult‐
Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑80 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system.
page 8‑17
.
WARNING:
{
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger seat. The passenger sensing system
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
System on page 2‑74
.
If you have any questions, call Customer
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑22 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑71. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑21 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑106
.
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See
your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
WARNING:
{
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑22
.
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Passlock® (U. S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Operation (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) . . . 3-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . . 3-36
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Assist Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Rear Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, all door locks, and
the tailgate.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8‑8
.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCK: Press to lock all the doors. The parking lamps
may flash and the horn may sound.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
Vehicles with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), transmitter
functions work up to 30 feet (9 m) away from the
vehicle.
If a door is open or ajar when LOCK is pressed, the
horn sounds several times to let you know the doors did
not lock and the content theft‐deterrent system is not
armed. Pressing LOCK again while the horn is sounding
or within three seconds after the horn stops sounding,
the doors lock but the content theft‐deterrent system
does not arm until the opened door is closed.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
Different feedback modes can be programmed through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Remote
Keyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4‑33.
UNLOCK: Press to
unlock the driver door and
turn on the interior lamps.
The parking lamps may
flash and the horn may
sound.
L (Panic): Press to make the horn sound and the
headlamps and taillamps flash for up to 30 seconds. To
turn them off wait for 30 seconds, or press L again,
or start the vehicle.
Press UNLOCK again within three seconds and all of
the doors unlock.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery:
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery. Replace with a CR2032 or
equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use the key
in the driver or front passenger door or press the LOCK
or UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
(Continued)
To lock a door from the inside, move the manual lever
on the door forward. To unlock a door from the inside,
move the lever on the door rearward.
You will see a colored area on the lever when the door
is unlocked.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
If the vehicle has power door locks and the remote
keyless entry system, it has an automatic lock/unlock
feature.
On vehicles with power
door locks, the switches
are located on the driver
and the front passenger
armrests.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock all doors
automatically when the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park). All the doors will unlock when the shift lever is
moved back into P (Park).
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock all the doors when
the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
The doors will unlock when the key is removed from
the ignition.
Driver Switch shown
Press L to lock all the doors at once. To unlock all the
doors, press U.
To change the automatic door lock and unlock settings,
see “Automatic Door Locks” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 4‑33.
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever on
each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from the rear
seating areas.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear door when the security lock is on, unlock
the door and open the door from the outside.
Rear Door Security Locks
(Crew Cab)
If the vehicle is a crew cab model, it may have rear door
security locks. With this feature, the rear doors are
locked so they cannot be opened from the inside.
To disengage the security locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using the ignition key, turn the lock to the vertical
position.
The rear door security
lock is located on the
inside edge of each rear
door below the security
lock label.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
If the vehicle has power door locks, this feature protects
you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is
in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the driver door will unlock.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)
To engage the security locks:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
To open a rear door, open the front door. Then, use the
handle located on the front edge of the rear door panel
to open it. The rear doors must be closed before closing
the front door.
2. Using the ignition key, turn the lock to the
horizontal position.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tailgate
WARNING:
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate,
even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate can easily lose
their balance and fall in response to vehicle
maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may
result in serious injuries or death. Do not allow
people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
Open the tailgate by pulling up on the outside handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
When the tailgate is shut, be sure it is latched securely.
On vehicles with a locking tailgate, use the ignition key.
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate. Turn
the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To partially lower the tailgate:
Removing the Tailgate
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly on the
entire tailgate assembly.
To remove the tailgate:
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly on the
entire tailgate assembly.
2. Remove the retaining
cable from the
2. Remove the retaining
cables from both sides
of the tailgate by
passenger side of the
tailgate by pulling the
clip away from the bolt
head while pushing the
cable bracket forward.
pulling the clips away
from the bolt heads
while pushing the cable
bracket forward. When
the larger part of the
hole on the bracket is
over the bolt, slide the
bracket off of the bolt.
Tailgate Partially Down
When the larger part of the hole on the bracket is
over the bolt, slide the bracket off the bolt.
3. With the tailgate partially down, lift up on the
passenger side and pull the tailgate toward you,
then move the tailgate to the right to release the
driver side. You can then remove the entire tailgate
assembly.
3. Slide the lower end fitting onto the top bolt. The
tailgate will now stay in the partially opened
position.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the driver side.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure it is secure.
If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot
be in the partially opened position. Use the top position
on the bracket to anchor it on the bottom bolt.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Windows
WARNING: (Continued)
On vehicles with manual
windows, use the window
crank to open and close
each window.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Power Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
On vehicles with power windows, the switches on the
driver's door armrest control both windows.
The passenger's door has a window switch that controls
that window. Press the front of the switch to open the
window. Pull the switch up to close it.
(Continued)
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
Windows with an express-down feature allow the
window to be lowered fully without pressing and holding
the switch. Press the front of the switch to the first
position, and the window opens a small amount. Press
the switch down fully and the window goes all the
way down.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has
the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) system, the
vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent alarm
system.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull up the front
of the switch.
Sun Visors
To use the sun visor(s), pull the edge of the visor
nearest to the windshield toward you.
Visor Vanity Mirror
To activate the content theft-deterrent system:
1. Close all the doors.
Your vehicle may have a driver's side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and slide the cover to expose
the mirror.
2. Lock the doors with the RKE transmitter. The
security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will flash.
If the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, but
a door is open, the horn will chirp six times. Press the
lock button again, within three seconds, and the doors
will lock. Close the open door and the system will be
activated.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door is not opened using the RKE
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
transmitter, or by OnStar®, the pre-alarm will go off.
If the engine is not started or unlock not pressed within
10 seconds, the front turn signal lamps will flash for
two minutes, and the horn will sound for two minutes,
then will turn off to save the battery power.
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the RKE transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate if
you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock,
or power door lock switch. The system can only be
activated using the RKE transmitter, or by OnStar®. See
the OnStar Owner's Guide for additional information.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter or start the engine.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the lights
flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may
be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 6‑112.
If the alarm does not sound or the front turn signal
lamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
.
If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
.
Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter. The
alarm will not stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passlock® (U. S. Only)
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system that
enables fuel if the vehicle is started with a valid key.
If an incorrect key is used or the ignition lock cylinder is
tampered with, the fuel system is disabled and the
vehicle does not start.
The security light turns off approximately five seconds
after the engine is started. See Security Light on
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation (Canada Only)
page 4‑31
.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
the engine restarts if you turn the engine off. However,
the Passlock® system is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer/retailer. The vehicle is not
protected by Passlock® at this time. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The key uses a transponder that matches an
immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only the
correct key starts the vehicle. If the key is ever
damaged, the vehicle may not start.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be a
problem with the theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. Check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6‑112. If the
engine still does not start with the other key, the vehicle
needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key
may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the theft-deterrent system and have a new key made.
4. Insert the second current driver's key in the
ignition and start the engine within ten seconds of
removing the previous key. If the engine does not
start see your dealer/retailer for service.
5. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. Insert the key
to be programmed and turn it to ON/RUN within
ten seconds of removing the previous key.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
The security light turns off once the key has been
programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
Canadian Owners: If the keys are lost or damaged,
only a dealer/retailer can service the theft-deterrent
system to have new ones made. Two current driver's
keys are required to program additional keys.
If the security light comes on and stays on while driving,
the engine will restart if you turn it off. However, the
theft-deterrent system is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer/retailer. The vehicle is not
protected by the theft-deterrent system at this time.
To program a new key:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
2. Insert the current driver's key in the ignition and
start the engine. If the engine does not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the vehicle and more
information.
.
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
gradually increased.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) LOCK/OFF: This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. It locks the steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles. The key can on be removed in
LOCK/OFF.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service.
(B) ACC/ACCESSORY: This is the position in which
you can operate the electrical accessories or items
plugged into the accessory power outlets. On automatic
transmission vehicles, this position unlocks the ignition.
On manual transmission vehicles, it unlocks the ignition
and steering wheel. Use this position if the vehicle must
be pushed or towed.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the ignition to ON/RUN and
apply the regular brake pedal.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
(C) ON/RUN: This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running. The
transmission is also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start your vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Manual Transmission
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor
and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down.
.
Audio System
.
Wipers
.
Power Windows
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, power to these features
continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door
is opened.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
the engine warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool. When the engine starts, let go of the
key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the procedure. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to ACC/ACCESSORY
or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
WARNING:
{
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles
with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0° F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located in the engine compartment behind
the underhood fuse block on the driver side of the
vehicle.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord to prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Automatic Transmission Operation
WARNING:
{
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
The vehicle has a shift lever on the steering column.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display is powered anytime the
shift lever is capable of being moved out of P (Park).
This means that if the ignition is turned off, but not in
LOCK/OFF, there will be a small current drain on the
battery which could discharge the battery over a period
of time. If you need to leave the key in the ignition
but not in LOCK/OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging the battery.
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑34
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑46
.
.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must
fully apply the brake pedal before you can shift
from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑36.
WARNING:
{
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑29
.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is are already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) to help control vehicle speed on steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
the brakes off and on.
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until
the vehicle is going slowly enough.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to the next gear
and the vehicle will have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 5‑11.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive)
without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third)
instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads,
or when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears and when going down a steep hill.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth) the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is your shift pattern.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle the
engine.
R (Reverse): To back up, press the clutch pedal. After
the vehicle stops, shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return to Neutral
and release the clutch pedal. Then press the clutch
again and shift into R (Reverse). Do not attempt to shift
into 5 (Fifth) prior to shifting into R (Reverse). The
transmission has a lock out feature which prevents a
5 (Fifth) gear to R (Reverse) gear shift.
Here is how to operate the manual transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you slowly
press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete stop
and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
Neutral and let up on the clutch. Then press the clutch
pedal back down and shift into 1 (First).
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.
Up-Shift Light
This light will show you
when to shift to the next
higher gear for best fuel
economy.
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and has a manual
transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer
case is in four-wheel low.
Shift Speeds
WARNING:
{
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions
permit. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the best performance out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read this
section before using four-wheel drive. You should use
two-wheel‐drive high for most normal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can
cause premature wear on the vehicle's powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel
Drive for extended periods of time.
The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage the vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed
on the vehicle.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
N
2 m
4 m
4 n
Normal
Severe
YES
YES
Extreme
YES
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not
drive in four-wheel drive until you can have the flat
tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage the
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be covered
by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when
the compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑39 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑39 for further
information.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting into Four‐Wheel Low will turn Traction Control
and StabiliTrak® off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5‑8 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6
for more information.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.
4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. Use four-wheel high when
you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads,
or in most off-road situations.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in
most street and highway situations. The front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages
the front axle to give you extra traction. It sends the
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
four-wheel low if you were driving off-road in sand, mud,
or deep snow and while climbing or descending steep
hills.
WARNING:
{
Shifting into Four‐Wheel Low will turn Traction Control
and StabiliTrak® off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 5‑8 and StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6
for more information.
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park), or if you have a manual transmission,
even if you are in gear. You or someone else
could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the
parking brake before placing the transfer case in
Neutral. See Parking Brake on page 3‑33.
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on the
selected setting. If the lights do not come on, you
should take the vehicle in for service. An indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will stay on when the shift is
completed.
If the transfer case does not shift, it will return to the last
chosen setting.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel High
Shifting from Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low
Press and release the Four-Wheel High button. This
can be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock
automatically.
To shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stopped or
moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission
in N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or the
clutch pedal pressed for a manual transmission. The
preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is to
have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Shifting from Four-Wheel High to
Two-Wheel High
Press and release the Two-Wheel High button. This can
be done at any speed, and the front axle will unlock
automatically.
Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button. You
must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop
flashing and stay on before shifting the transmission
into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
It is normal to hear and feel the vehicle's transfer case
shift into Four-Wheel High. If you shift with the vehicle
stopped, the indicator light may still flash slowly. It may
be necessary to shift the transmission momentarily
into R (Reverse) and D (Drive), for an automatic
transmission, or R (Reverse) and 1 (First) for a manual
transmission to have the light stop flashing.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when the
vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to
Shifting to Neutral
Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High
Use N (Neutral) when you plan to tow the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑39 for towing
instructions. To shift the transfer case into N (Neutral)
do the following:
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High, the vehicle must be stopped or
moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission
in N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or the
clutch pedal pressed for a manual transmission. The
preferred method for shifting out of four-wheel low is to
have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Press the regular brake pedal and shift the
transmission in N (Neutral), or press in the clutch
for vehicles with a manual transmission.
Press and release the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel
High button. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High or
Two-Wheel High indicator light to stop flashing and stay
on before shifting the transmission into gear or
releasing the clutch pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel High and
Four-Wheel Low buttons at the same time for
10 seconds. The N (Neutral) light will come on
when the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is
complete.
If the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High button is
pressed when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving
faster than 3 mph (5km/h), the Four-Wheel High or Two
Wheel High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but
not complete the shift.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal and shift
the transmission to R (Reverse) for one second,
then shift the transmission to D (Drive) for
one second, or 1 (First) for vehicles with manual
transmissions, and let out the clutch to insure the
transfer case is in N (Neutral). If the transfer case
is not in N (Neutral), repeat this procedure starting
at Step 3.
Shifting Out of Neutral
After towing the vehicle, you will have to shift out of
N (Neutral) in order to drive. To shift out of N (Neutral),
do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in
P (Park). Use 1 (First) for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
7. Turn the engine off by turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park),
or 1 (First) for vehicles that have a manual
transmission.
3. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral), or press the
clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High,
or Four-Wheel Low).
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of
N (Neutral), the indicator light will go out.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission to the desired position.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal
is located to the left of the
brake pedal, near the
driver door.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push the parking brake pedal down to its
fully-applied position.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake
symbol, directly rearward to release the parking brake.
A chime will activate and the brake warning light,
located on the instrument panel, will flash when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three seconds. The
chime will deactivate and the light will turn off when the
parking brake is set and the vehicle is moving below
3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System Warning Light on
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
page 4‑24
.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission)
WARNING:
{
If you have four-wheel drive, the vehicle will
be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in
P (Park) — if the transfer case is in Neutral.
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) or
four-wheel low (4L) — not in Neutral.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the
lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
page 5‑46
.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the key, the vehicle is in
P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3‑33 for more
information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 3‑34.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you
can, the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Shifting Out of Park (Automatic
Transmission)
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the brake pedal
before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition is
ON/RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation on
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift
lever all the way into P (Park)
page 3‑23
.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced.
.
Prevent the ignition key from being removed
unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
Parking the Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake
pedal is applied.
The shift lock control system is always functional
except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage
(less than 9 V) battery.
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, before you get
out of the vehicle, move the shift lever into R (Reverse),
and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever
has been placed into R (Reverse) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF, remove
the key and release the clutch.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑41 for more information.
If you are parking on a hill, or if the vehicle is pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
WARNING:
.
{
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
(Continued)
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING: (Continued)
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when it is on
fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the automatic transmission shift lever to
P (Park), or the manual transmission shift lever to
Neutral.
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
WARNING:
{
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑37.
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the automatic transmission shift lever is in
P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the
parking brake.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission)
on page 3‑34
.
(Continued)
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror. Automatic dimming reduces the glare of
lights from behind the vehicle.
The mirror may also have OnStar® and/or a compass
and outside temperature display.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See the OnStar® owners guide for
more information about the services OnStar® provides.
See Compass on page 3‑40 for more information about
the compass display. See “Temperature Display” after,
for more information about the outside temperature
display.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system and
®
how to subscribe to OnStar. See the OnStar owners
guide for more information about the services OnStar
provides.
AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press and hold AUTO / ( for
about three seconds or depending on the mirror, press
O to turn automatic dimming on or off. The automatic
dimming feature comes on and the indicator light
illuminates each time the vehicle is started.
Adjust this type of mirror to avoid glare from
the headlamps behind you by turning the knob
counterclockwise for nighttime driving and clockwise
for daytime driving.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Display
Compass
Y b / O (On/Off) : Press Y b or depending on the
mirror, press O to turn the display on or off.
Compass Operation
Press Y b or depending on the mirror, press O once to
turn the display on or off.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
1. Press and hold Y b / O for a few seconds. The
Compass Calibration
current unit of measure (F or C) flashes.
The compass may need calibration if:
2. Press Y b / O again and release to change the
unit of measure. Wait several seconds and the
compass/temperature display returns with the
selected unit of measure.
.
CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
.
After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Interference can be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
It is normal under certain conditions for the temperature
update to be delayed. If an incorrect temperature
displays for an extended period, see your dealer/
retailer.
.
The compass does not display the correct heading
Cleaning the Mirror
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, press and
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
hold Y b / O for several seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in
zone eight or drive out of the area, the compass
variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
2. Press and hold Y b / O until Z and/or a zone
number displays.
3. Press Y b / O repeatedly until the new zone
number displays. After you stop pressing the
button, the display shows a compass direction
within a few seconds.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Manual Mirrors
To adjust the power mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
to choose the driver or passenger mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirrors toward the vehicle. Push outward, to
return the mirrors to their original position.
2. Press one of the four buttons located on the
control pad to move the mirror to the desired
direction.
Outside Power Mirrors
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have
controls on the driver
door armrest.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse the
mirror direction using the control pad.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push outward, to
return the mirror to its original position.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Convex Mirror
WARNING:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
{
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
Cupholders
This vehicle may have two cupholders located on the
lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders
located at the front end of the console. Vehicles with
bench seats may have cupholders attached to the front
of the center seat.
For vehicles that are an extended cab or crew cab
model, the vehicle also has two rear cupholders. On
crew cab models, the cupholders are located at the
front end of the rear center seat cushion. On extended
cab models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top
of the rear center console.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
Vehicles with ashtrays will use one of the cupholders.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage
Rear Storage Area
For vehicles with bench seats, there may be a center
armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at
the front of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to
open the storage area.
Extended cab models might have storage
compartments under the rear seats.
For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel packages, the
vehicle may have a two‐tiered center armrest storage
area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the front of the
armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to the top
storage area. A second tab is located below the top one
and allows you to access the bottom storage area. Lift
up on the lower tab to release the latch. Then, raise the
lid of the lower storage area. The upper storage area
will lift up with the lid of the lower storage area.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until you
feel the latch close.
Assist Handles
This vehicle may have assist handles to be used when
getting out of the vehicle. The assist handles are
located above the doors.
To access the storage compartments, lift the cushion on
the bottom of the rear seats. This exposes the storage
boxes under the seat.
If the vehicle has roof-mounted side impact air bags,
there are assist handles located above both the driver
and front passenger doors.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lift the lid from the center area to access the
storage box.
To open a storage box, unhook the bottom and lift the
two latches on each side of the storage box.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Open/Vent): Press and hold this button to vent, and
open the sunroof. Release the button when the desired
position is reached.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof.
R (Close): Press and hold this button to close the
sunroof. Release the button when the desired position
is reached.
The sunroof control
buttons are located on the
headliner.
The sunshade must be opened manually.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the
tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation,
noise or plug the water frainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from sunroof.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-18
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-25
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
The turn signals do not work while the hazard warning
flashers are on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever
toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
53 : Headlamp High/Low‐Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
L : Windshield Washer
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. For bulb replacement, see Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on
page 6‑50. For a blown fuse or circuit breaker, see
J : Cruise Control
Flash-to-Pass.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 6‑112
.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also appear
in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑36 for more information.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is held toward you. The
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
2 3 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer: Push the
turn signal/multifunction lever away from you to turn the
high beams on.
Pull the lever towards you to return to low beams.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper controls are located on the
multifunction lever. They are controlled by turning the
band with this z symbol.
The windshield wipers work in all ignition positions,
except off. This includes the Retained Access Power
mode. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 3‑20
.
This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel
cluster when the high beam headlamps are on.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the band to one of the following positions:
Windshield Washer
WARNING:
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the band to z and then
release it. Several wipes, hold the band on z longer.
{
N (Adjustable Interval Wipes): For a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or
down for less frequent wipes.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes, turn the band to the first
solid position past the delay settings.
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes, turn the band to the
second solid position past the delay settings.
QL (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the
paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then either
stop or return to your preset speed.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System (TCS) on page 5‑8. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the cruise control can
be turned back on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
WARNING:
{
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
These controls are located at the end of the
multifunction lever.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
R (On): Turns the system on.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume a previously set speed.
rT (Set): Press the button at the end of the lever to
set the speed.
If the vehicle's StabiliTrak® /Traction Control System
(TCS) begins to limit wheel spin while the cruise control
is on, the cruise control automatically disengages. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 or Traction Control
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
WARNING:
{
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
This light on the instrument panel cluster comes on
while the cruise control is on.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set to a desired speed and then
the brake is applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset.
1. Move the cruise control lever to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
Once the vehicle is going about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
3. Press r T at the end of the lever and
release it.
more, move the cruise control switch briefly from R to S .
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will go right back up to your chosen speed
and stay there.
If the lever is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle
keeps going faster until the lever is released or the
brake is applied. Do not hold the lever at resume/
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed you set
earlier.
.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press r T at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. The
vehicle will cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
Applying the brake will turn off the cruise control.
.
Move the cruise lever from R to S . Hold it there
until the desired speed is reached, and then
release the lever. To increase the vehicle speed in
very small amounts, move the lever briefly to S .
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
.
Press and hold r T until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
.
Move the cruise control lever to 9 .
Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a
.
To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
.
press r T .
manual transmission.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on automatically at normal
brightness, together with the following:
Exterior Lamps
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 4‑12 for
more information.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the following:
.
Sidemarker Lamps
.
Taillamps
The exterior lamp control is located on the instrument
panel on the left side of the steering wheel.
.
License Plate Lamps
O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the right
of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior lamp
positions.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together with
the previously listed lamps and lights.
O (Off): Turns off all exterior lamps including the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
Headlamps on Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on
and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off and then back on. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
.
The transmission is not in P (Park) if you have an
automatic transmission.
.
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, if the parking lamps
are turned on manually, the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) will stay on.
When the DRL are on, only the parking lamps or
reduced intensity low beam headlamps will be on. The
taillamps, sidemarkers, and other lamps will not be on.
The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular
headlamps.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it will take about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system will turn on after the transmission has
been shifted from P (Park) to D (Drive). The headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker
lamps, and the instrument panel lights turn on at normal
brightness. The radio lights will become dimmer when
the headlights are off compared to when the headlights
are on.
page 4‑13
.
Fog Lamps
The fog lamp button is located near the exterior lamps
control.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system can turn on the headlamps when driving in
a parking garage, through a tunnel or when there is
overcast weather. This is normal.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, press to turn the fog
lamps on or off. An indicator light will turn on in the
button when the fog lamps are on.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the light
sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than
the delay.
The parking lamps or low‐beam headlamps must be on
for the fog lamps to work. The fog lamps will go off
whenever the high-beam headlamps come on. When
the high beams go off, the fog lamps come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The cargo lamps can be used if more light is needed in
the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top-box storage
units.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel up
or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel lights
and the radio display. The instrument panel lights,
cluster, and radio display do not dim to complete
darkness. The instrument panel light brightness control
will only work if the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
See Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
This button is located on
the driver side of the
instrument panel near the
exterior lamp control.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamps, located in the front and cargo area of
the vehicle, come on when any door is opened.
Turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel,
located next to the exterior lamps control, all the way
up. In this position, the lamps remain on whether a door
is opened or closed.
Press to turn the cargo lamps on and off.
Reading Lamps
The dome lamps must be on for the cargo lamps to
come on. See Dome Lamp on page 4‑13.
Press the lens on the lamps to turn each reading lamp
on or off.
These lamps will not come on with the dome lamps.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located below the
exterior lamps control.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press this button in to
make the dome lamps remain off when the doors are
open. To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
E again and return it to the out position.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Exit Lighting
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
The interior lamps will come on when the key is
removed from the ignition. The lamps will not come on if
the dome override button is pressed in.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW
BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
on page 4‑36
.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
This helps to prevent the battery from running down.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone.
The vehicle may have an accessory power outlet
located below the climate control system and on the
rear of the center console. A small cap must be pulled
down to access an accessory power outlet. When
not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
unplug electrical equipment when not in use
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a removable ashtray and
cigarette lighter.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The ashtray is located in the center console area. The
ashtray can be removed for cleaning. When the ashtray
is removed, this area can also be used as a cupholder.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
A. Temperature Control D. Air Conditioning
B. Fan Control
E. Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
Temperature Control: Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed.
system runs the air conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is near, or below freezing.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will still
enter the vehicle and will be directed according to the
position of the mode knob.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the air conditioning is on.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
The fan control must be on to use the air conditioning.
Select from the following modes:
There might be a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and floor and side window outlets. Cooler
air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in floor mode
because this could cause the interior window to fog.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the recirculation mode is on. This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the
vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle.
/ (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
or moisture. Air is directed to the floor, windshield, and
side window outlets. When this mode is selected, the
system runs the air conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is near freezing or below.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor/defog,
defrost, or defogging modes. If recirculation is selected
in these modes, the indicator will flash or not come on.
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or
frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and
side window outlets. When this mode is selected, the
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheel on the outlets to change the
direction of the air flow.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in the
center of the outlet to direct the air up or down, or slide
the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the airflow
from side‐to‐side.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to show how
the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is
going, about how much fuel has been used, and many
other things needed to drive safely and economically.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States automatic transmission 2.9L version shown, Canada, manual transmission, 3.7L and 5.3L similar
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the speed in both miles per
hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The vehicle has a trip odometer that indicates how far
the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was
last set to zero.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4‑33 for more information.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running by pressing the trip information stem.
See “Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 4‑33 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
If the cluster is replaced the new one will automatically
detect and update the vehicle's accumulated mileage.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in the
shaded warning area.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING:
{
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑66.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑36 for more information.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has one of the passenger airbag status
indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the
vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right
front passenger position. The passenger airbag status
indicator is on the instrument panel. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑74 for important safety
information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refer to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑22
for more information, including important safety
information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
This light comes on briefly
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑36 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑26 for
more information.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking though,
both parts need to be working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a problem.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. See Parking
Brake on page 3‑33 for more information. The light
stays on if the parking brake does not release fully. If it
stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it
means there is a brake problem.
The Antilock Brake
System (ABS) light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or it
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑39.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑24.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
The light flashes while the StabiliTrak system and TCS
are working to assist the driver with directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
If the StabiliTrak system and TCS light comes on and
stays on while driving and a TRACTION FAULT or
SERVICE STAB SYS message displays on the DIC, the
vehicle needs service.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑36 for all
brake related DIC messages.
The light also comes on steady when the StabiliTrak
system and/or TCS are turned off. The DIC also
displays a TRAC OFF and/or STAB SYS OFF message.
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the
StabiliTrak system is off, the system does not assist the
driver with directional control of the vehicle. The light
turns off when the TCS and StabiliTrak system are
turned back on.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6, Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 5‑8 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑36 for more information.
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control System
(TCS) Warning Light
The StabiliTrak and
Traction Control System
(TCS) indicator/warning
light comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Tire Pressure Light
This gauge shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
If the gauge pointer is near the top of the gauge, the
engine is too hot. It means that the engine coolant has
overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under
normal driving conditions, pull the vehicle off the road,
stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑33 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63
for more information.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑33 for more
information.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑66 for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑3.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/
retailer.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
the Tank on page 6‑8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
.
.
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑5.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
WARNING:
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
{
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system. The
vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/
retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator
light then goes off.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
Security Light
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for more information.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
Highbeam On Light
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑14
.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these indicate a problem with the vehicle's fuel
gauge:
Fuel Gauge
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gauge shows how
much fuel the vehicle has
remaining in the fuel tank.
.
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
.
The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or
speeding up.
.
The gauge does not go back to empty when the
ignition is turned off.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, a LOW FUEL
message will display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑36 for more information.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Information
Odometer
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
information such as the trip odometer, personalization
features, and warning messages. The DIC display is
located on the instrument panel cluster.
The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles
for the United States or kilometers for Canada.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears on
the DIC display. The trip odometer shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset of the trip
odometer in either miles for the United States or
kilometers for Canada.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip odometer
reset stem on the DIC acknowledges some current
warnings or service messages. Some messages only
clear after the required action has been taken.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the reset
stem until the display returns to zero.
The DIC has different menu items which can be
accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem on
the DIC. This includes trip information, such as the
odometer and trip odometer, engine oil life reset, and
personalization features that are explained in the
following information. The DIC trip odometer reset stem
is located on the instrument panel cluster next to the
DIC display.
Engine Oil Life System
With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN and
then press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET
appears — alternating between OIL LIFE and
RESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OIL
message alerts you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions. Always reset the
OIL LIFE message after an oil change. To reset the
message, see Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3 for more information.
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to program the door locks to a
preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
Personalization Features
Language
2. Press and hold the power door lock button until the
DIC display shows the current door lock mode.
This feature allows you to choose the language in which
the DIC display shows information.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release the
reset stem and press and hold again to view the
next mode.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN, but
do not start the engine.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
2. Close all doors so the DOORS message does not
display in the DIC.
3. Momentarily press and release the reset stem
until the current language is displayed: English
(default), Spanish, or French.
The following are the available modes:
Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors when the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and unlocks all of the
doors when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
4. To select a different language, press and hold the
reset stem until the next language appears.
5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired language is
displayed. Once the desired language is shown on
the DIC display, the language is set.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks all of the doors
when the key is removed from the ignition.
6. To exit the language selection, momentarily press
and release the reset stem. All DIC messages will
now display in the language selected.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park) and unlocks the driver's door
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Feedback
This feature allows you to program the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) feedback to a preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature:
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks the driver's door
when the key is removed from the ignition.
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
RKE transmitter at the same time. Hold both
buttons until the DIC display shows the current
RKE feedback mode.
Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). The doors will not automatically
unlock.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release the
reset stem and press and hold again to view the
next mode.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will not automatically
unlock.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are the available modes:
DIC Warnings and Messages
RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parking lamps
when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the RKE
transmitter.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. The messages are displayed for several
seconds each.
RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes the parking
lamps when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press and release the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display. Each message must
be acknowledged individually.
RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be cleared.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages only makes the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.
RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback. There will
be no feedback when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
CHANGE OIL
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in
your vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine
Overheating on page 6‑33 and Climate Control System
on page 4‑16 for more information. This message
displays along with the ENG HOT message.
This message displays when the oil needs to be
changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 6‑15 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) FAULT
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Antilock Brake System (ABS). Check the ABS as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Brakes on page 6‑37 and Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 4‑25 for
more information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
DOORS
This message displays when one or more of the doors
is ajar. Check all the doors on your vehicle to make
sure they are closed. The message clears from the
display after all of the doors are closed.
ENG (Engine) HOT
BRAKES
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is hot. Check the engine coolant
temperature gauge. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 4‑27. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible if you suspect
the engine is overheating. See Engine Overheating on
page 6‑33 for more information.
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See
Brakes on page 6‑37 and Brake System Warning Light
on page 4‑24 for more information. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLUID
LOW TIRE
This message displays if the brake fluid is low. Check
the brake fluid as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See Brakes on
page 6‑37 for more information. Press and release the
reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
This message displays if a low tire pressure is detected
in any of the vehicle's tires. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display. The message appears at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. See Tires on page 6‑55 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑63 for more information on tires
and the correct inflation pressures.
FUEL CAP
This message displays if the vehicle's fuel cap is either
off or loose. Pull over as soon as possible and check to
see if the fuel cap is secure. You may also see the
check engine light on the instrument panel cluster. If the
check engine light does come on when the fuel cap was
loose, it may take a few driving trips before the light
turns off. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑28
for more information if the light still remains on. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
OIL
This message displays when the oil pressure is low.
See Oil Pressure Light on page 4‑30 and Engine Oil
on page 6‑15 for more information.
PARK BRK (Brake)
This message displays when the parking brake is set.
See Parking Brake on page 3‑33 and Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑24 for more information. The
message clears from the display after the parking brake
is released or by pressing and releasing the reset stem.
message and clear it from the display.
LOW FUEL
This message displays if the level of fuel in the vehicle
is low. Also check the fuel gauge. See Fuel Gauge on
page 4‑32 for more information. Refill the fuel tank as
soon as possible.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCED POWER
SERV (Service) TPM
(Tire Pressure Monitor)
This message displays when the vehicle's engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 4‑27. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑66 for more information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer/retailer.
SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)
This message displays if your vehicle needs service.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive)
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transfer case control system. Check the transfer case
on your vehicle and have it serviced by your dealer/
retailer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28 for more
information about the transfer case. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE CHARG (Charge) SYS
(System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the
battery warning light may also turn on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on
page 4‑24. The battery will not be charging at an
optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter
the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
TRAC (Traction) OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off by pressing the StabiliTrak
button. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for more
information.
TRACTION FAULT
This message will display if there is a problem with the
TCS. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 5‑8 for
more information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS (System)
TURN SIGNAL
This message displays if there is a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6
for more information.
This message displays when the turn signal is on for
about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
STAB (Stability) SYS (System) OFF
This message displays when the StabiliTrak system is
turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for
more information.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
WARNING:
{
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
page 6‑3
.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑20 for more information.
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2
.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Radio
Radio(s)
Press and hold HR until the correct hour displays. Press
and hold MIN until the correct minute displays. There is
an initial two-second delay before the clock goes into
time-set mode. To display the time with the ignition off,
press RCL, HR, or MIN.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
Press and hold the HR button until the correct hour
displays. Press and hold the MIN button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the ignition on
or off.
AM-FM Radio
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the HR and MIN buttons at the same time until RDS
TIME displays. To accept this time, press and hold the
HR and MIN buttons, at the same time, for another
two seconds. If the time is not available from the
station, NO UPDAT (update) displays.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it could take a few minutes for
the time to update.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming.
.
Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies.
.
Display messages from radio stations.
.
Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
could broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters display instead of the frequency.
RDS stations can also provide the time of day, a
program type (PTY) for current programming, and the
name of the program being broadcast.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the desired display, then press and
hold this knob for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep. The selected display is now the default.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press to turn the system on and off.
o p VOL/VOLUME: Turn to increase or to decrease
the volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Automatic volume
automatically adjusts the audio system to make up for
road and wind noise while driving.
RCL (Recall) (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch the
display between the radio station frequency, band, and
the time. When the ignition is off, press to display
the time.
Set the volume at the desired level. Depending on the
radio and displays, press to select MIN, MED, MAX
AUTO VOL, or LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. AVOL
displays. Each higher setting allows for more volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then while
driving, automatic volume increases the volume, as
necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The
volume level should always sound the same while
driving.
DISPL (Display) (Radio with CD): When the ignition is
turned off, press to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
displays while using RDS. The display options are
station name, RDS station frequency, PTY (program
type), and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while in
XM mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/
Channel Name.
For the Radio with CD, NONE displays if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic
volume off, press until OFF or AUTO VOL OFF
displays.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
AM FM (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch between FM1,
q SCAN r : Press and hold for more than
two seconds. SCAN or SCN displays and the radio
produces one beep. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning presets.
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection displays.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PSCN or PSC
displays and the radio produces one beep or depending
on the radio, two beeps. The radio goes to a preset
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning presets.
q r TUNE : Turn to select radio stations.
q SEEK r : Press to go to the previous or to the next
station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until two beeps sound. The
radio goes to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
If the radio does not have XM, up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons.
AUDIO: Push and release until BASS/TREB,
or depending on the radio, BASS, MID, or TREB
displays. Turn to increase or to decrease. The tone
display shows the bass or the treble level. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
If the radio has XM, up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,
six AM, six XM1 and six XM2) can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons.
.
For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold the w x
arrows to increase or to decrease the tone.
To program either radio:
1. Turn the radio on.
To adjust the bass/treble or bass/midrange/treble to the
middle position, press and hold the AUDIO knob. The
radio produces one beep and adjusts the display level
to the middle position.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped).
.
For the AM-FM Radio, press AM FM to select
.
For the AM-FM Radio, adjust bass or treble to the
FM1, FM2, or AM.
middle position, select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble).
Then press and hold for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or
T (treble) and a zero displays.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until the radio beeps once. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed again, the
station that was stored, returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control displays. ALL CENTERED displays
and a beep sounds.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and
the left speakers, push and release until BAL (balance)
displays. Turn to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
.
For the AM-FM Radio, adjust both tone controls
and both speaker controls to the middle position,
first exit out of audio mode by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function
or wait five seconds for the display to return to
time of day. Then press and hold for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds. CEN (center)
displays.
.
For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold the w x
arrows to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
FADE or depending on the radio, FAD displays. Turn
the knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to select
customized equalization settings designed for country/
western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
.
For the AM-FM Radio, press and hold the w x
arrows to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM displays. Then manually adjust
the bass/treble, or bass/midrange/treble by using the
AUDIO knob.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob to select BAL or FADE/FAD, then
push it again and hold it until one beep sounds.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
.
For the AM-FM Radio, adjust balance or fade to
the middle position by selecting BAL or FAD. Press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until a
beep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade)
and a zero displays.
1. Press the P-TYPE to activate program type select
mode. P-TYPE or TYPE and a PTY displays.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press the SEEK /
TYPE button to select and to take you to the PTY's
first station.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED
displays and a beep sounds.
4. To go to another station within that PTY by
pressing the SEEK / TYPE button twice to display
the PTY and then go to another station.
.
For the AM-FM Radio, adjust both tone controls
and both speaker controls to the middle position by
exiting out of audio mode. To do this, press any
button for the radio to perform that function or wait
five seconds for the display to return to time of day.
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds. CEN (center)
displays.
To cancel the seek, press the SEEK / TYPE button.
This also exits the program type seek mode and returns
to the last tuned station.
Fade might not be available if the vehicle is a
regular cab model.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS) Only
For the Radio with CD player, the six pushbuttons
have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
six FM2), can be programmed on the numbered
pushbuttons. To program PTYs:
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
displays and the radio returns to the last tuned station.
SCAN: To scan PTYs, press and hold the SEEK /
SCAN until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY
displays.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency lets
the radio switch to a stronger station with the same
program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and
hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio
could switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
3. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set, returns.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF displays. The radio
does not switch to other stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
This function does not apply for XM Satellite Radio
Service.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The last message can be displayed by pressing the
INFO button. The last message stays on the display
until a new message is received or the radio is tuned to
a different station.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: For the Radio with CD, the Alert feature
warns of local or national emergencies. When an alert
announcement comes on the current radio station,
ALERT! displays. The announcement is heard, even
if the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO displays.
TRAF (Traffic): For the Radio with CD, if TRAF
displays, the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. When a traffic announcement is
broadcast on this station you will hear it.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all
RDS stations.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio seeks to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio stops seeking and
TRAF displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAF displays.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol or INFO displays.
Press this button to see the message. The message
can display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button to turn off the
traffic announcements.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words display after every press
of this button. Once the complete message has
displayed, the information symbol or INFO disappears
from the display until another new message is received.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the volume
is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio
Service.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Messages for XM Only
Radio Messages
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑59 later in this
section for further detail.
CAL ERR or CAL (Calibration Error): The audio
system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the
factory. If CAL or CAL ERR displays it means that the
radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer/retailer for
service.
Playing a CD (Radio with Single CD
Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing. To insert a CD with the ignition
LOC or LOCKED: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
off, first press the Z (eject) button or the DISPL knob.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
Care of Your CD Player
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other
protective cases and away from direct sunlight and
dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a
CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
1 FLD x (Previous): This button is inactive when
playing a CD.
2 FLD w (Next): This button is inactive when playing
a CD.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
quickly within a track. Press and hold for less than
two seconds to reverse at 10 times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold for more than two seconds to
reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed. Release
to play the passage. ET (elapsed time) and the elapsed
time of the track displays.
o TUNE p : Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or
advances through tracks. The track number displays for
each track.
DISPL (Display): Press to see how long the current
track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time of the
track displays. To change the default on the display
(track or elapsed time), press until you see the desired
display, then press and hold for two seconds. The radio
produces one beep. The selected display is now the
default.
4 FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
quickly within a track. Press and hold for less than
two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing
speed. Press and hold for more than two seconds to
advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release
to play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the
track displays.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
6 RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM ON displays. RDM
and the track number displays when each track starts to
play. Press again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
displays.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject can be activated
with either the ignition or radio off. CDs can be loaded
with the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed
first.
q SEEK r : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or the previous track. Press the right arrow
to go to the start of the next track. Pressing either arrow
for more than two seconds scans the next tracks,
playing the first eight seconds of each track until all of
the tracks have been previewed. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning and to play the track.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
Radios with the MP3/WMA feature are capable of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc. For more information
on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R disc, see Using an
MP3 on page 4‑55 later in this section.
The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 on page 4‑55 later in this section.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
CD Messages
The label could be caught in the CD player.
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
normal, the CD should play.
.
You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
253 folders, 50 playlists, 20 sessions, and 949 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist names. An MP3/WMA CD-R
that was recorded using no file folders. The system can
support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the
depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback. If a CD contains
more than the maximum of 253 folders, 50 playlists,
20 sessions, and 949 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are played.
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
.
Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
.
.
Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl extension,
other file extensions might not work.
Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are displayed by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Root Directory
.
.
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder or
album should contain 18 songs or less.
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is
usually better to burn the disc all at once.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
Tracks are played in the following order:
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
.
No Folder
If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
begins from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have
played, play continues from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from
the last folder, play begins again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you
have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISPL (display) later in this section for more
information. The new track name displays.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this button
while in folder random mode takes you to the previous
folder and plays the tracks in random order in that
folder.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this button while in
folder random mode takes the CD to the next folder and
plays the tracks in random order in that folder.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited.
These playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
button for less than two seconds to reverse at 10 times
the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more
than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release this button to play the passage.
REV and the elapsed time of the track displays.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays. If you
want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
Z button or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
button for less than two seconds to advance at 10 times
the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more
than two seconds to advance at 20 times the normal
playing speed. Release this button to play the passage.
FWD and the elapsed time of the track displays.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 RDM (Random): To play the tracks in random order
in the current folder or playlist, press and release this
button. FLDR RDM (folder random) displays. Once all of
the tracks in the current folder or playlist have played,
the system moves to the next folder or playlist and
plays all of the tracks in random order.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display shows only eight characters, but there can
be up to four pages of text. If there are more than eight
characters in the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing
this knob within two seconds takes you to the next page
of text. If there are no other pages to be shown,
pressing this knob within two seconds takes you to the
next display mode.
To play all the tracks in random order on the CD, press
and hold this button for two seconds. A beep sounds
and DISC RDM (disc random) displays. This feature
does not work with playlists.
.
Track mode displays the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow takes the CD to the previous or to the next
random track.
.
Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
.
Time of day mode displays the time of day and the
ID3 tag song name.
Press and release this button again to turn off random
play. NO RDM (no random) displays.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the desired display, then press and
hold this knob for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep and the selected display is now the default.
q SEEK r : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the start of the next track. Pressing either
SEEK arrow for more than two seconds searches the
previous or next tracks at two tracks per second.
Release the button to stop searching and to play the
track.
INFO (Information): INFO displays when a current
track has ID3 tag information. Press this button to
display the artist name and album contained in the tag.
INFO disappears from the display when the information
in the ID3 tag has finished being read.
o TUNE p : Turning this knob fast tracks reverse or
advances through the tracks in all folders or playlists.
The track number and file name displays for each track.
Turning this knob while in random fast tracks reverse or
advances the tracks in sequential order.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol illuminates
on the display when a CD is loaded.
CH Unavl: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for that
preset button.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject can
activate while either the ignition or radio is off. CDs can
be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this button is
pressed first.
Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be received
with your XM Subscription package.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
NotFound: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process should
take no longer than 30 seconds.
XM Lock: The XM receiver in your vehicle could have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having your
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
No Signl: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
Radio ID: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Loading: The radio system is acquiring and processing
audio and text data. No action is needed. This message
should disappear shortly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer/retailer.
Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
Check XM: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver could have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Non-RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle's radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC displays.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle's radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Chime Level Adjustment
Cellular Phone Usage
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle's chime level. To
change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal level
to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display. To
change back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level will change
from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is
changed, three chimes will sound to indicate the new
volume selected. Removing the radio and not replacing
it with a factory radio or chime module will disable
vehicle chimes.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with
the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur
when making or receiving phone calls, charging the
phone's battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Trailer Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑14.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑24.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot
of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If there is a problem with
the ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4‑25
.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each front
wheel and at both rear wheels.
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature
uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module
to supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist
feature will automatically disengage when the brake
pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is
normal.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic stability control system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists the driver with directional control of
the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
SERVICE STAB SYS message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑36 for more information. When
this message is displayed, the system is not working.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the
vehicle on the intended path.
StabiliTrak and Traction Control (TCS) come on
automatically whenever the vehicle is started and the
systems are reset with each ignition cycle. However,
when the transfer case is placed in Four-Wheel-Low
mode, StabiliTrak is automatically disabled. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28 for more information.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
TCS portion of the system off if the vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice, or snow, and it is necessary to “rock”
the vehicle to attempt to free it. If traction control is
turned off, only the brake-traction control portion of
traction control will work. The engine speed
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
management will be disabled. In this mode, engine
power is not reduced automatically and the drive wheels
can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction
control to activate constantly. See If Your Vehicle is
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑29
.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the StabiliTrak/TCS button until the TRAC OFF and
STAB SYS OFF messages come on the DIC and the
StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on the instrument panel.
To turn TCS and StabiliTrak back on, press and release
the StabiliTrak/TCS button.
The StabiliTrak/TCS
light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the TCS system or
StabiliTrak is both on and
activated.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak/TCS light and the appropriate TRAC OFF or
STAB SYS OFF message will be displayed on the DIC.
The vehicle will still have brake-traction control when
TCS or StabiliTrak is off, but will not be able to use the
engine speed management system. The StabiliTrak/
TCS light flashes when either system is actively
working. See Traction Control Operation following for
more information.
The StabiliTrak/TCS
button is located on the
instrument panel.
To turn off TCS, press and release the StabiliTrak/TCS
button. The StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster, and TRAC OFF comes on the
DIC. To turn TCS back on, press and release the
StabiliTrak/TCS button.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCS can operate on dry roads under some conditions.
When this happens, the system may be heard working
or a reduction in acceleration may be noticed. This is
normal and does not mean there is a problem with the
vehicle. Examples of these conditions include hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) is part of
StabiliTrak. TCS limits wheel slip which is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS
applies the brakes to limit wheel spin and also reduces
engine power. The system may be heard or felt while it
is working. This is normal and does not mean there is a
problem with the vehicle.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to limit
wheel spin, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin
the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
The message TRACTION FAULT appears in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when a TCS or Antilock Brake
System (ABS) problem has been detected and the
vehicle needs service. When this message is on, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑36
.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The StabiliTrak/TCS
light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the TCS system or
StabiliTrak is both on and
activated.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is
low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Steering
The StabiliTrak/TCS
button is located on the
instrument panel.
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
To turn off TCS, press and release the StabiliTrak/TCS
button. The StabiliTrak/TCS light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster, and TRAC OFF comes on
the DIC. To turn TCS back on, press and release the
StabiliTrak/TCS button.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑3.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because
there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Brakin on page 5‑3
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: StabiliTrak® assists the driver with
directional control. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6. If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then a
steering or cornering skid will need to be handled
entirely by the driver using counter steering techniques
and an acceleration skid will be best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Go Off-Roading
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive should not be
driven off-road except on a level, solid surface.
.
Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
.
Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is
fully inflated.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off‐road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
.
Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
.
Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
.
Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are
not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can
be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off‐road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's
WARNING:
{
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
.
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
.
The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
(Continued)
.
Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑31 and Tires on page 6‑55.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
.
Always use established trails, roads, and areas
that have been specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving and obey all posted
regulations.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it
properly.
.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning, breaking
down trees, or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
.
Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands,
feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle
bounce.
.
Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
.
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle's exhaust system.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to
control the speed. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
.
You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle's
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
.
There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
.
The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
.
More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
WARNING:
{
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you are driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Some things to consider:
.
Is the path ahead clear?
.
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
.
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
.
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with
one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the
top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you
near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no
road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use
good judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Driving on Hills
.
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
.
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
.
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
.
What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
WARNING:
{
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
.
.
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
.
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
.
If the engine is still running, shift the transmission
to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in R (Reverse).
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
If the engine has stopped running, you need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed
and the parking brake still applied, shift the
automatic transmission to P (Park) or the manual
transmission to Neutral and restart the engine.
Then, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking
brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as
possible in R (Reverse).
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, shift to
P (Park) or 1 (First) with a manual transmission, and
turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some
help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path
the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift
the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
.
While backing down the hill, put your left hand on
the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position so
you can tell if the wheels are straight and can
maneuver as you back down. It is best to back
down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in
the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far
to the left or right will increase the possibility of a
rollover.
WARNING:
{
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on
the transfer case overrides the transmission. You
or someone else could be injured. If you are going
to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and
shift the transmission to P (Park). But do not shift
the transfer case to Neutral.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral), or pressing the clutch pedal if the
vehicle has a manual transmission, to rev-up the
engine and regain forward momentum. This will not
work. The vehicle can roll backward very quickly
and could go out of control.
.
Never try to turn around if about to stall when
going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll
over. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight
down the hill.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
.
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
maintain vehicle control?
.
What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
.
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large
rocks?
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes
and apply the parking brake.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so
engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to
do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle
under control at all times.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
WARNING:
{
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose
gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can
cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the
vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline,
consider the following:
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop
into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt
even more.
WARNING:
{
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent this
is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
.
A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On
loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a
reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Stalling on an Incline
WARNING:
{
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control. On
wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle does get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause it
to slide out of control.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure
you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side,
even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out
on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you will be right in its path.
WARNING:
{
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, keep
the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Water
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
WARNING:
{
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine. When
going through water, remember that when the brakes
get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain
and on Wet Roads on page 5‑24.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
WARNING:
.
{
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things to check on your own include:
Hydroplaning
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
.
.
.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
on page 6‑55
.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider
having it serviced by your dealer/retailer before
departing.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
WARNING:
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
WARNING:
{
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑13 for information
about driving off-road.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 improves the
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, it might be beneficial to turn
off the traction control part of the StabiliTrak® System to
help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. Once
beyond the deep snow, push the StabiliTrak® button
again to turn traction control back on.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a
slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
WARNING: (Continued)
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
WARNING:
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑37.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
(Continued)
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑30.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the
vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking
method.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
WARNING:
{
If you let your vehicle's tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑78.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Recovery Hooks
WARNING:
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. For four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift into 4HI. Turn off any traction system. Shift back
and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear,
or with a manual transmission, between 1 (First) or
2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as
little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after
a few tries, it might need to be towed out. Recovery
hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 5‑39.
{
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle's without a center pillar, like extended cab
models, will have the Tire and Loading Information
label attached to the driver side extended cab
door, above the door latch post. The Tire and
Loading Information label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and
pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the size of the original equipment tires (C)
and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑55 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑63
.
There is also important information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this
section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar
(B‐pillar). With the driver door open, you will find
the label attached below the door latch post.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46 for
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety, and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle's capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, cargo, and any accessories or
equipment added to your vehicle after it left the
factory should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be
sure to spread out your load equally on both sides
of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If the load is heavy, it should be spread out.
Label Example
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle's Certification/Tire label or consult your
dealer/retailer for additional details.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the bottom section of the driver side
center pillar (B-pillar) or on the end of the driver
side instrument panel. Vehicles without a center
pillar, like extended cab models, will have the
Certification/Tire label attached to the edge of the
driver side, extended cab door, below the door
latch post. The label shows the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo,
and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
(Continued)
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: (Continued)
WARNING:
{
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer/retailer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving
on page 5‑13
.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-Tiered Loading
Add-On Equipment
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across
the width of the pickup box, you can create an
upper load platform. The planks must be inserted
in the pickup box depressions. The length of the
planks must allow for at least a 2 cm (3/4 inch)
bearing surface on each end of the plank.
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before
you buy and install the new equipment.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load's center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
A reinforcement kit for mounting a toolbox is
recommended. See your dealer/retailer.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle's
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to
carry a slide-in type camper.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Notice : Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to the vehicle can damage it, and
the repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not install a slide-in
camper or similar equipment on the vehicle.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Recreational Vehicle Towing
We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider
having the pickup box removed and a commercial or
recreational body installed. However, we recommend
that conversions of this type not be done to pickups.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured, there
are differences between a chassis cab and a pickup
with the box removed which could affect vehicle safety.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Towing
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.
Towing Your Vehicle
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑8.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑25.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle.
2. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking
5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑33.
page 3‑28
.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the front wheels will still turn.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
After towing see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent the
battery from draining.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear
Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this
section for more information.
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
WARNING:
{
Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3‑28
.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28.
3. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from
the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent the
battery from draining.
4. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑33.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑33
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
.
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
4. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or
driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent the battery from draining.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
WARNING:
{
Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's
transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the automatic transmission is
in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in any
gear. You or others could be injured. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer
case is shifted to N (Neutral).
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
page 3‑28
.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
If the vehicle being towed will not be started or
driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent the battery from draining.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑33
.
4. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in 1 (First).
After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
WARNING:
{
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
There are many different laws, including speed
.
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
The weight on the vehicle's tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”
later in this section for more information.
.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive), but you may want to shift to a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
If the vehicle has a manual transmission it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
2WD Regular Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
2WD Extended Cab
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,400 lbs (1 542 kg)
2,400 lbs (1 089 kg)
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,200 lbs (1 452 kg)
2,200 lbs (998 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
3.42
3.73
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission, ZQ8
Sport Suspension
3.42
2WD Crew Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
2,100 lbs (953 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
3.42
3.73
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
3,800 lbs (1 724 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission, ZQ8
Sport Suspension
3.42
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
4WD Regular Cab
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
4WD Extended Cab
3.73
3.73
3.73
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg)
2,100 lbs (953 kg)
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission
2.9L L4 Manual Transmission
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
3.73
3.73
3.73
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
1,900 lbs (861 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
3.42
4.10
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
4WD Crew Cab
3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission
3.73
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
3.42
4.10
5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for
more information.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of
the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes
the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it,
and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there
are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle
can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must
be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31 for more information about the vehicle's
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The
effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering
capacity more than the total of the additional weight.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since
the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now
weighs:
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer
the vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be
sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification/Tire label located at the bottom of the
center pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle, or see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR,
including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a
weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the
rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution
spring bars.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might
think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on
the rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear
axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg)
can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. For trailers
up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) safety chains may be attached
to the attaching points on the bumper. For heavier
trailers, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer's
recommendation for attaching safety chains. Always
leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
A step bumper hitch can be used for trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs (90 kg)
tongue weight.
Notice: If a step-bumper hitch is used, the bumper
could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there
is ample room when turning to avoid contact
between the trailer and the bumper.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: (Continued)
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the
trailer cannot tap into the vehicle's hydraulic brake
system.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
.
Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch,
or rear-most window open.
Driving with a Trailer
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
WARNING:
{
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑37.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for
the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling
and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And
always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by
itself.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to
the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods
of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become very
warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed that might be
affected by high ambient temperatures.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Turns
Driving On Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive), but you may want to shift to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If the vehicle has a
manual transmission it is better not to use the
highest gear.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine
is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with an
automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual
transmission in N (Neutral) with the parking brake
applied, for a few minutes before turning the engine off.
If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑33.
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers
are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into gear for vehicles
with a manual transmission.
Parking on Hills
WARNING:
{
5. If the vehicle has four-wheel-drive, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral). See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑28
for more information.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
6. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
.
Start the engine
If parking the rig on a hill:
.
Shift into a gear
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet for vehicles with an automatic transmission,
or into gear for vehicles with a manual
.
Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
transmission. Turn the wheels into the curb if
facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Trailer Recommendations
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
or the Index for more information. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts,
cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during the trip.
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load the
vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of the
people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg)
for each passenger. The total cargo load must not be
more than the vehicles CWR.
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The best performance is obtained by correctly
spreading out the weight of the load and choosing the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
The vehicle may be equipped with a four‐pin trailer
towing harness. This harness has a four‐pin trailer
connector that is attached to a bracket on the hitch
platform. The four‐wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
For more information see Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑46
.
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps
.
White: Ground
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . 6-50
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑80.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
WARNING:
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
{
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑80.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Maintenance Record on page 7‑14.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than
87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑6 for additional
information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑28. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit‐related problems.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the check
engine light will be lit on the instrument panel cluster.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑36 and
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑28 for more
information.
WARNING:
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
WARNING:
{
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
Your Vehicle on page 6‑107
.
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. If the fuel cap is
not properly installed, the FUEL CAP message appears
on page 4‑28
.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{
WARNING:
{
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. It is
located below the front center of the hood.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
3. Lift the hood.
1. Pull the handle with
4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle on the lower
left side of the
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and
release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.
instrument panel.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.7L engine (2.9L engine similar), you will see the following:
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 6‑26
.
page 6‑36
.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 6‑41.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 6‑28.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑20.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on
on page 6‑41.
page 6‑35
.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 6‑37.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑113.
M. Battery on page 6‑40.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 6‑25.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine, you will see the following:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑20.
Engine Oil
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑20
.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑36
.
D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 6‑28.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 6‑37.
I. Battery on page 6‑40.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑35.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑113.
L. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 6‑26
.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
L4 and L5 Engines
V8 Engine
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L), add at
least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This
section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 6‑119
.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL message comes on. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑36. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE OIL message being turned on, reset the
system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
To reset the Engine Oil Life system:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center of
the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE message
is displayed.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem until
several beeps sound. This confirms that the oil life
system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑36.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger's side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for
more information on location.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑12 to determine
which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten
the clips to hold the cover in place.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
WARNING:
{
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
If adding it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or there could be a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
.
When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
.
At high speed for quite a while.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
.
While pulling a trailer.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3, and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C (180°F
to 200°F).
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above 10°C
(50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the vehicle
in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gauge moves
and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 10°C
(50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), the
engine might have to idle longer. Should the fluid level
be low during this cold check, check the fluid hot before
adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot gives a more
accurate reading of the fluid level.
Then, without shutting off the engine:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with this symbol
on it is located in the
engine compartment on
the passenger side of the
vehicle.
Checking the Fluid Level
To prepare the vehicle:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑12
for more information on location.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
pull it back out again.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD
area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold
check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a
hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed
down to get an accurate reading.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10.
.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After this is done:
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to check the manual transmission fluid is
when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in
the manual transmission does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealer/retailer
service department.
If doing it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or there could be a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause
the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check your transmission
fluid.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
Check the fluid level only when the engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough to touch the transmission case.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be
sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add
more fluid as described in the next steps.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑12 for
How to Add Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10.
reservoir location.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
a leak in the system is suspected. Adding fluid will not
correct a leak.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in the vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check and What to Use
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the fluid level in the clutch master
cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10.
2.9L Engine shown (3.7L Engine similar)
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
5.3L Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑33.
engine temperature.
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
What to Use
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
WARNING:
{
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑10 for more information.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
It is located toward the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for more
information on location.
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When the
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When the engine is warm, the
level could be above the FULL COLD level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, there could
be a leak in the cooling system.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the
Recovery Tank
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
WARNING:
{
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start the vehicle.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to
the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full turn.
4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX‐COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck might be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX‐COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to
flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has a coolant temperature gauge displayed
on the instrument panel to warn if the engine is
overheating. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
on page 4‑27. If the engine is too hot, the air
conditioning might stop working. This is normal and
helps cool the engine.
WARNING:
{
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
You may decide not to lift the hood when the warning
appears, but instead get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑8.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have
the vehicle serviced.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine
if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when
idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, the vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine
Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Engine Fan Noise
.
Tows a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑46.
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located near
the front of the engine
compartment, behind the
radiator. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑12 for
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir location.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the proper range.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10
.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑10
.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use.
If operating the vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑12 for
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
reservoir location.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑12
for the location of the
reservoir.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
on page 7‑3
.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
WARNING:
{
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑12.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
The fluid level should be
above the PP mark. If it
is not, have the brake
hydraulic system checked
to see if there is a leak.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the PP mark but not over the
MAX mark.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑107
.
page 7‑10
.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑119.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
WARNING:
{
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.
DANGER:
{
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Vehicle Storage
WARNING:
{
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑41 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for battery
location.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12‐volt
battery with a negative ground system.
WARNING:
{
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would not
be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you
have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in Neutral.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
(or batteries) installed in your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of
that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be
present.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a
remote negative (−) jump starting terminal. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for
more information on the terminal locations.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as good there, and the
chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for
this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 mm to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the
rear axle.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑10 to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section apply to this vehicle.
There are two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you'll need to add some
lubricant. Remove the plug and add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑10.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the front axle, you may need to add some
lubricant.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check your front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑10 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for
vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer for service.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑52.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING:
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
B. High-Beam Headlamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑11.
2. Reach in and access the bulb sockets from inside
the engine compartment.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑11.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly and pull it
straight out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb
by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out.
6. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
secure it.
7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb
socket.
2. Reach in to access either one of the bulb sockets
in the engine compartment.
8. Push the bulb socket straight in and turn it
clockwise to secure it in the headlamp assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the bulb socket.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
6. Push the bulb socket straight into the lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace the CHMSL bulb:
1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp assembly.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back‐up Lamp
3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it from
the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 3‑10.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
3. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb straight out to
release it from the socket.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb straight into the socket until it
clicks.
4. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks to
secure it.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
5. Reach under the rear bumper to reinstall the bulb
socket into the connector.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to secure it to the
connector.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 7‑3 for more information.
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
912
Center High‐Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
License Plate Bulb
Headlamps
W5W
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑12.
High-beam
9005
9006
Low-beam/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield.
Parking/Front Turn Signal
Parking Lamp (Inboard)
3757KA
3157A
Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal, Taillamp,
and Back‐up Lamp
3057
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
WARNING: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
WARNING:
{
Pressure on page 6‑63
.
.
.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
(Continued)
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger Vehicle Tire Example
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑74
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See “Compact Spare Tire” under Spare Tire on
page 6‑102 for additional information.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
page 6‑63
.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 70 percent as high as it
is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(A) P‐Metric Tire: The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first
character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
page 6‑63
.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
page 5‑31
.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63 and Loading
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
the Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑74
.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑71
.
Vehicle on page 5‑31
.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31 . How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
Check your tires once a month or more. Also
check the tire pressure of the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tire on page 6‑102 for
additional information.
you can get the following:
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
WARNING:
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are underinflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition, and set to
the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set
the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 35 psi (241 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following. When
you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the
cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑31 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire's sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high‐speed driving at 35 psi (241 kPa).
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly on your
vehicle, excluding the spare tire. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and
transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑66 for
additional information.
At the same time, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message is displayed on the DIC display screen. The
low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. For
additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
on page 4‑33 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
page 4‑36
.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑70 and Tires on page 6‑55.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle's tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for
your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑72
.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's
air pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall. To let air-pressure out of a tire you can
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gauge, or a key.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes
on and stays on.
You have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions,
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching procedure is outlined
below:
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
1. Set the parking brake.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTO to OFF
four times within three seconds. A double horn
chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire warning
light starts flashing. The double horn chirp and
flashing TPMS warning light indicates the TPMS
matching process has started. The TPMS warning
light should continue flashing throughout the
matching procedure. The LOW TIRE message
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS low
tire warning light and the DIC LOW TIRE
messages have turned off. If yes, the TPMS
sensors have been relearned. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF.
If the low tire warning light and the SERV TPM
message on the DIC are on after completing
Step 5 for the driver side rear tire, the sensor
relearn process has not been successful. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK/OFF and repeat the
matching process beginning with Step 2.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp. The
single horn chirp should sound within 15 seconds,
confirming that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position. If you
do not hear the confirming single horn chirp, turn
the ignition switch to LOCK and start over
beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑71 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3
.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new. The first
rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare or compact spare tire in
the tire rotation.
Maintenance on page 7‑3
.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑63 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 6‑71 and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑76
.
page 5‑31
.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑66
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑119
.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
WARNING:
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80
.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
Spare Tire and Tools on page 6‑96
.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑56 for
additional information.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑70
for information on proper tire rotation.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires
of different sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire and
wheel assembly. It is all right to drive with your
vehicle's compact spare tire temporarily. It was
developed for use on your vehicle. See Spare Tire
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑65.
on page 6‑102
.
WARNING:
{
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on
your vehicle.
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
(Continued)
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
WARNING:
{
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑72 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑3 for additional
information.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning:
The temperature grade for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80 for more
information.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other
Tire Chains
than P215/70R16, P235/75R16, P265/70R17, or
P235/50R18 use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the
rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front
axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the
ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear
the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
WARNING:
{
If your vehicle has P215/70R16, P235/75R16,
P265/70R17, or P235/50R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle. Do not spin
the vehicle's wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING:
{
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
WARNING: (Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear – not in
Neutral.
page 4‑3
.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
WARNING:
{
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest
away from the one being changed. That would be
the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
(Continued)
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
A. Wing Nut
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
B. Storage Bag and Tools
The tools you will need are located under the right front
passenger seat.
1. Move the seat all the way forward to locate the
tool bag.
2. Locate the wing nut (A) used to retain the storage
bag and tools (B). Turn it counterclockwise to
release the bag.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put the tools to the side while you access the jack and
wheel blocks.
Regular/Extended Cab
For regular and extended cab vehicles, the jack and
wheel blocks are located under the cover at the center
of the vehicle behind the front seats.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
D. Jack Knob
2. Lower the jack (A) by turning the jack knob (D)
counterclockwise to release the jack from the
bracket.
1. Turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to
remove it.
3. Turn the wing nut (C) holding the wheel blocks (B)
to the back of the vehicle counterclockwise to
release the wheel blocks.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crew Cab
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are
located under the driver side rear seat.
1. Reach under the rear seat to access the jack and
wheel blocks.
A. Jack Handle C. Jack Handle
Extensions
D. Wheel Wrench
B. Jack
E. Wheel Blocks
2. Turn the jack knob counterclockwise to lower the
jack all the way and release it from the bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
Use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench
to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D), the jack handle
extensions (A) and the jack handle (C) as shown.
2. Insert the chiseled end of the jack handle (C) at a
slight angle through the hole in the rear bumper
and into the funnel-shaped guide.
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn
the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 6‑93.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tilt the retainer when
the tire has been
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
lowered, and slide it up
the cable so it can be
pulled up through the
wheel opening.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑80 for more
information.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end
of the wheel wrench (E) into one of the slots on the
wheel and gently prying the cap out.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts
by turning it counterclockwise. Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
Front Position
4. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown for
the front or rear locations.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position
Front Position — XFE
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position
the jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket off
of the frame.
For Extended Fuel Economy (XFE) vehicles,
position the jack on the flat portion of the jacking
pocket structure rearward of the jacking pocket.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
Rear Position
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under
the rear axle and get as close as possible to the
shock absorber.
5. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head.
6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel nut
by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑80
.
tighten the nuts until
the wheel is held
against the hub.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
9. Install the spare tire.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position
Rear Position
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑119 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the
tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑119 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end fitting is
visible.
Your vehicle has an underbody‐mounted tire hoist
assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off
your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare
must be installed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑96
.
WARNING:
{
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow
the instructions listed next.
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceed to
Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 6‑81
.
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the
jack under the wheel.
9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the tire.
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in place.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist end of the extension into the hoist shaft
hole in the bumper and turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of
the way.
11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of
the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise one turn
or until the wheel retainer assembly is disengaged.
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the
jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off
the jack or is hanging by the cable.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as
soon as possible.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you
can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire
using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑85.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
3. Assemble the wheel wrench, the jack handle
extensions, and the jack handle as shown.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the center
wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of the wheel.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the tire
part way up. Make sure the retainer is seated in
the wheel opening and the valve stem is
pointed down.
Continue raising the tire, watch to make sure it
does not get caught on anything on the underbody.
If the tire does get caught, loosen two or three
turns and push and pull the tire and then retighten.
Repeat this procedure as many times as needed to
ensure proper stowage.
6. When the tire is properly seated to the underbody,
continue turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
4. Insert the chiseled end of the jack handle at a
slight angle through the hole in the rear bumper
and into the funnel-shaped guide.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the tools:
1. Return the tools to the storage bag.
2. Attach the storage bag to the floor under the front
passenger seat.
3. Reinstall the wing nut to secure the bag to the
vehicle.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, check to make sure the tire valve stem is
pointing down, then use the wheel wrench to
loosen and then tighten the cable.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the jack and wheel blocks:
Regular/Extended Cab
5. Put the cover in position and insert and tighten the
wing nut to secure it.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Install the wheel blocks (B) first.
2. Reinstall the wing nut (C) by turning it clockwise to
secure the wheel blocks to the vehicle.
3. Lower the jack (A) all the way and insert the jack
into the bracket.
4. Raise the jack by turning the handle clockwise to
secure the jack within the bracket.
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Reinstall the jack and wheel block assembly in the
mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in
the base of the jack onto the pins in the mounting
bracket.
Crew Cab
3. Turn the handle to raise the jack until it is secure,
but do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
1. Attach the wheel blocks (B) to the jack (A)
with the wheel block retainer and the wing
nut (C).
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire. Although
the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your
vehicle was new, it can lose air over time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not
drive in four-wheel drive until you can have the flat
tire repaired and/or replaced. You could damage the
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be covered
by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when
the compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.
Full-Size Spare Tire
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
vehicle's spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 62 mph
(100 km/h) for distances up to 500 miles (804 km). For
heavy payloads or towing, and for low traction or
four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace the
full-size tire. Of course, it is best to replace your
vehicle's spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.
Your vehicle may have a full-size spare tire, which,
when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire may lose air
over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑63 and Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑31 for information regarding proper
tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on
how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 6‑85 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
on page 6‑96
.
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This
spare was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is
alright to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and the different size spare tire is installed, keep the
vehicle in two-wheel drive.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. The
vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage the vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed
on the vehicle.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h) for distances up to
500 miles (804 km). For heavy payloads or towing, and
for low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or
replace the full-size tire. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare
tire will be available in case you need it again.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being
cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using
cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any
accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately.
To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the
cleaning cloth.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use
spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
page 7‑10
.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑107
.
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
.
.
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑119 for the
vehicle's engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle
and the damage would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑80 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑80
.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of
the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the tab
and push down on the cover until the tab clicks into
place.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑12 for more
information on location.
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
ABS 2
Usage
ABS 2 (ABS Pump)
AUX PWR 1
AUX PWR 2
BCK/UP
Accessory Power 1
Accessory Power 2
Back-up Lights
BLWR
Climate Control Fan
Cluster
CLSTR
CNSTR VENT
Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
Cruise Control Switch, Inside
Rearview Mirror, Transfer Case
Control Module, Brake Switch, Clutch
Disable
CRUISE
DR/LCK
DRL
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
Daylight Running Lamps
The trailer brake relay is located on the bottom side of
the battery harness.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor, Can
Purge Solenoid, Air Injector
Reactor (AIR) Relay
Fuses
O2 SNSR
Usage
ERLS
Oxygen Sensors, Air Injection
Reactor (AIR) Relay
ETC
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Air Conditioning Control Head, Power
Seats
FOG/LAMP
A/C
Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and
FRT PRK LAMP Passenger Side Power Window
Switches Lighting
A/C CMPRSR
Air Conditioning Compressor
Antilock Brake System (ABS), ABS
Module, Four‐Wheel Drive, Gravity
Sensor
ABS
FRT/AXLE
FSCM
Front Axle Actuator
Fuel System Control Module
ABS 1
ABS 1 (ABS Logic)
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Regulated Voltage Control
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Stop Lamps
BACKUP LAMP Backup Lamp
RVC
HORN
Horn
S/ROOF
STOP
STRTR
TBC
HTD/SEAT
Heated Seat (If Equipped)
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch, Neutral
Safety Back‐Up Switch, Ignition
Coils 1‐5, Air Conditioning Relay
Starter Solenoid Relay
Truck Body Controller
Transmission Control Module
Transfer Case Control Module
IGN
TCM
INJ
Injectors
TCCM
LT HDLP
PCM B
PCMI
Driver Side Headlamp
Power Control Module (PCM) B
Power Control Module (PCM)
TRAILER
BRAKE
Trailer Brake
TRANS
Transmission Solenoid
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
(If Equipped)
TRN/HAZRD
FRT
Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo Lamps/
Mirrors
PWR/SEAT
PWR/WNDW
RDO
Power Windows (If Equipped)
Radio
TRN/HAZRD
REAR
Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
REAR
PRK LAMP
Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger Side
Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System/Stop
VSES/STOP
Driver Side Rear Taillamp, Passenger
Side Airbag Indicator Lighting,
Instrument Panel Dimming Power
(2WD/4WD switch lighting)
WPR
WSW
Wiper
REAR PRK
LAMP2
Wiper/Washer Switch
RT HDLP
Passenger Side Headlamp
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
A/C CMPRSR
BEAM SEL
DRL
Usage
Air Conditioning Compressor
Beam Selection
Relays
Usage
Run/Crank, Airbag System Fuse,
Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, Front
Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse,
Transmission Fuse, ERLS
RUN/CRNK
Daylight Running Lamps
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Back Up Lamp
FOG/LAMP
BK UP LP
HDLP
STRTR
VSES
Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
Headlamps
Vehicle Stability Enhancement
System
HORN
Horn
WPR
Wipers (On/Off)
Ignition 3, Climate Control, Climate
Control Head Fuse, Power Seat Fuse
IGN 3 HVAC
PRK/LAMP
PWR/TRN
WPR 2
Wiper 2 (High/Low)
Front Parking Lamp Fuse, Rear
Parking Lamps
Miscellaneous
A/C CLTCH
MEGA FUSE
WPR
Usage
Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
Mega Fuse
Powertrain, Electronic Throttle Control
Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse
Retained Accessory Power (Power
Window Fuse, Wiper/Washer Switch
Fuse), Sunroof Fuse
Diode — Wiper
RAP
6-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.9L and 3.7L
5.3L
Fuses
Usage
A
B
Trailer Park Lamp
Communication Interface Module
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System, Sensing and Diagnostic
Module
C
D
Trailer Auxiliary Maxi-Fuse
6-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑10 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
2.9L L4 Engine
3.7L L5 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.9L L4 Engine
3.7L L5 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
Fuel Tank
9.8 L
10.0 L
13.0 L
10.4 qt
10.6 qt
13.7 qt
4.7 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
74 L
5.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
19.5 gal
6-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications (cont'd)
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Transmission
Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Manual – Rear-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill)
Manual – Four-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
4.7 L
2.2 L
5.0 qt
2.3 qt
2.3 L
2.4 qt
140 Y
100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Type
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
2.9L L4
9
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
3.7L L5
5.3L V8
E
P
Automatic
Automatic
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
1.01 mm (0.040 in)
6-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑31.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
are driven off‐road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑13.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑5
.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer/retailer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in
good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
WARNING:
{
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑4.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At your dealer/retailer, you can be certain that you will
receive the highest level of service available. Your
dealer/retailer has specially trained service technicians,
uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up to date
tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Oil Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Oil message displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and the oil life system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life
system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑10 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑12. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑70.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
When the Change Oil message displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. The
services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑20.
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Maintenance II
Oil message has displayed or since the last
service.
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28
.
.
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑36.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑108
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
.
on page 6‑63
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑70.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑52
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑70
.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, and
folding seat hardware lubrication. Lubricate hood
safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot and tailgate
latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points, and
hinges. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑10. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑28
.
.
.
.
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑36.
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑82.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑63
Automatic transmission fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑70.
.
.
Four‐wheel drive vehicles: Transfer case fluid level
check and adding fluid, if needed.
Once a Year
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑20.
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑8.
.
.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑8.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑8
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑8.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
page 6‑26
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
page 6‑21
.
.
Spark plug replacement. An Emission Control
Service.
Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑28. An
Emission Control Service.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑20.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
service) for vehicles mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or mountainous
terrain, when frequently towing a trailer, or used for
taxi, police, or delivery service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑21.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way
down, your vehicle needs service.
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑33.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any
other position, your vehicle needs service.
on page 3‑33
.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
.
For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in P (Park). The ignition key should come out
only in LOCK/OFF.
WARNING:
{
.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press the
key release button.
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Parking Brake U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
Cable Guides or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Manual
Transmission
on page 6‑15
.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No.
U.S. 12345347, in Canada 10953517)
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Hydraulic Clutch
System
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Engine Coolant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
page 6‑28
.
Key Lock
Cylinders
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678).
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage, Folding
Seats, and Fuel
Door Hinge
Front and
Rear Axle
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,
in Canada 10953465).
Rear Driveline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Center Spline U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
and Universal or lubricant meeting requirements of
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Joints
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Constant
Velocity
Universal Joint
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.
U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)
or Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No.
U.S. 12371287, in
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Canada 10953437).
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.9L L4 Engine
3.7L L5 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
Spark Plugs
15942429
—
19210283
19210285
89017524
PF46
PF61
PF48
2.9L L4 and 3.7L L5 Engines
5.3L V8 Engine
12625058
12609877
41-103
41-985
Wiper Blades
Driver Side — 22 in (55 cm)
Passenger Side — 19 in (48 cm)
10389562
10389563
—
—
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
5.3L Engine
2.9L and 3.7L Engines
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-17
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
.
service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coverage
Roadside Assistance Program
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
number
.
Telephone number of your location
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation Program
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM
helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This
includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known.
Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑8 for more information.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it
is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if
there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the
full cost.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
Reporting Safety Defects
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Administrator, NHTSA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Service Bulletins
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Owner Information
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency Statement
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antenna
A
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . 4-61
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Assist Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Adjustment
Chime Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Adjustments
Headlamp Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-72
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Automatic Transmission
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-50
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
B
C
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Brake
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Care of
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Cleaning (cont.)
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Door
E
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
F
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Engine
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 6-46
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
H
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Range Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
High-Speed Operation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Hood
G
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Instrument Panel
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Lighting
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-46
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
K
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Lights
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
M
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
StabiliTrak® /Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Lumbar
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Parking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Passlock® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-4
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Power
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Outlets
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Radios
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Range Adjustment, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-12
Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint
S
Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Security
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Seats
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, 2-12
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak®/TCS Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-50
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Passlock® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
U
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Trailer Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Trailer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Parking Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Towing Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Transmission Operation, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheels
Windshield
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|